Date post: | 21-Jan-2016 |
Category: |
Documents |
Upload: | madanasekhar-tadimarri |
View: | 882 times |
Download: | 31 times |
~)
J ~
o )
3
)
o )
)
j
)
) l amp 0 PROJEC1S
) AlS1OM lM1poundO
eclS t_SSIon amp t)IsIriboJrion ProigtlSI UMITED lftd floO ~ Bodlt 191 G S - oonooOO 0gt
)
Introduction o amptie cwetYiew 01 substation engineering
1
Substations form on important port of the transmission and distribution networks - of electric pwer system They control the supply of power on different circuits by
means of various equipment such 0$ transformers compensating equipment ) circuit breakers etc Various circuits are joined together through these components to
bus bar systems at the substations While the bus-bar systems follow certain definite ~ patterns limiting the scaP for variation there is practically no standardization
regarding the physical arrangement called the layout of the various components ) relating to one another For the some type of bus-bar system different layouts have
been used in different countries and in fact in Indio there are variations in this regard j not only among the various State Electricity Boards but also within a State Electricity
Board This manual gives the basic requirements ond for the sake of illustration a contains typical layouts for various types of bus-bar systems
One of the primary requirements of a good substation layout is that it should be asbull i
economical as possible but it should ensure the desired degree of flexibility and ) reliability ease of operation and maintenance expansion and meets all safety
requirements of the operation and maintenance personnel Besides the layout 9 should not lead to breakdowns in power supply due to faults within the substation os
such faults are more serious A brief discussion on the various components and 1) auxiliary facilities required in substation and how they affect the layout is included
bull Many standards viz IS as lEe IEEE and the like guide the design of substations It is essential that the equipment used and the practices followed conform to the latest standards as required by the customer D This manual is aimed at understanding the basis of sub-station design If deals with
bull 0
voltage levels between 33 kV and 400 kV and standard switching schemes It also discusses briefly about sele~on of major equipment
bull 3
f)
3
)
j
J
~
J lt
)
gt
introduces lhe di(fllrent types 01 submiddotslaions
Generation station
Generation is done at 11 kV - 15 kV level As power of very high capacities cannot be nsmitted for long distances at these voltages it is stepped up using generator transformers to 110 kV - 400 kV levels Generation stations are in simple terms ~ step-up stations
)
Grid station o () Grid Stations are used to interconnect different gridsregionssectors They are
generally 400 kV substations They are stotions switching power from one generationgrid station to other They can olso be called Switching Stations
Distribution station
Distribution Stations are located at the load points where the power is stepped down to bull ~
bull o 11 kV - 110 kV levels
Bulk Industrial supply stations o
bull Bulk Industrial Supply Stations are distribution stations catering to one or 0 few consumers The supply voltage can range from 33 kV to 110 kV Industriol users do
I have their own generotion focilities besides the SEB supply and these s1a1ions oct asie step-up stations as well
bull o Sur 1S can also be classified as Step-up stotions Primary grid Stations Secondary
stc Sub-secondary stations and Distributions stations depending upon their POSHIn in the power system hierarchy
bull Generally the Substations are of outdoor type for 33 kV and above EHV Stations can be indoor depending upon the environmental conditions like pollution salinity etc and space constraints Indoor stations are Air - Insulated or SF6 gas - insulated depending upon the availability of space and financial constraints Gas Insulated D Substations (GIS) are extremely costly and requires extra maintenance and hence are preferred only when it is absolutely necessary
3
gt
Substation types
r
~1
~~
I
~
~
()
fJ j
G
D
0
bull 0
bull 0
~
0
a J )
J
--middot
c~
~ bull
D
-
Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion
Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the
eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking
currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and
breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated
below are used in India
36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)
725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)
145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)
245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the
provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance
400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system
requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over
voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit
recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current
chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive
currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz
CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as
bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer
type breakers are designed restrike-free
CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design
and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers
on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme
where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when
compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs
combination These are not popular in Indio
Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides
of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less
PlCnensive than dead tank CBs
-
middot
~
)
0
)
0 ~)
0
middot0
bull 1)
11
bull V
~
0
0
~
0
J
D
J
f)
gt ~
Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches
Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions
isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open
and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when
middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the
Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short
circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load
from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a
variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum
influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok
type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space
than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal
double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance
The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy
loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the
disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although
such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is
more difficult and time consuming
The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker
orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker
e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance
Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit
which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not
required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the
primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They
isoloe the primary system from the secondary
Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The
bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types
are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit
breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So
for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current
transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These
transform offer the following advantages
bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and
ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable
bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance
bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high
currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to
which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these
have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and
transported carefully -
~ It -
I ) Different classes of accuracy i
The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection
~ bull Metering
These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current
f)
bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher
magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters
~ Protection Classesmiddot
(110
bull
bull PS
Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In
terms of the following charaderiscs it
1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled
0 transformation ratio
3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the
j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level
and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used
I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT
R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC
~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser
3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any
specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Introduction o amptie cwetYiew 01 substation engineering
1
Substations form on important port of the transmission and distribution networks - of electric pwer system They control the supply of power on different circuits by
means of various equipment such 0$ transformers compensating equipment ) circuit breakers etc Various circuits are joined together through these components to
bus bar systems at the substations While the bus-bar systems follow certain definite ~ patterns limiting the scaP for variation there is practically no standardization
regarding the physical arrangement called the layout of the various components ) relating to one another For the some type of bus-bar system different layouts have
been used in different countries and in fact in Indio there are variations in this regard j not only among the various State Electricity Boards but also within a State Electricity
Board This manual gives the basic requirements ond for the sake of illustration a contains typical layouts for various types of bus-bar systems
One of the primary requirements of a good substation layout is that it should be asbull i
economical as possible but it should ensure the desired degree of flexibility and ) reliability ease of operation and maintenance expansion and meets all safety
requirements of the operation and maintenance personnel Besides the layout 9 should not lead to breakdowns in power supply due to faults within the substation os
such faults are more serious A brief discussion on the various components and 1) auxiliary facilities required in substation and how they affect the layout is included
bull Many standards viz IS as lEe IEEE and the like guide the design of substations It is essential that the equipment used and the practices followed conform to the latest standards as required by the customer D This manual is aimed at understanding the basis of sub-station design If deals with
bull 0
voltage levels between 33 kV and 400 kV and standard switching schemes It also discusses briefly about sele~on of major equipment
bull 3
f)
3
)
j
J
~
J lt
)
gt
introduces lhe di(fllrent types 01 submiddotslaions
Generation station
Generation is done at 11 kV - 15 kV level As power of very high capacities cannot be nsmitted for long distances at these voltages it is stepped up using generator transformers to 110 kV - 400 kV levels Generation stations are in simple terms ~ step-up stations
)
Grid station o () Grid Stations are used to interconnect different gridsregionssectors They are
generally 400 kV substations They are stotions switching power from one generationgrid station to other They can olso be called Switching Stations
Distribution station
Distribution Stations are located at the load points where the power is stepped down to bull ~
bull o 11 kV - 110 kV levels
Bulk Industrial supply stations o
bull Bulk Industrial Supply Stations are distribution stations catering to one or 0 few consumers The supply voltage can range from 33 kV to 110 kV Industriol users do
I have their own generotion focilities besides the SEB supply and these s1a1ions oct asie step-up stations as well
bull o Sur 1S can also be classified as Step-up stotions Primary grid Stations Secondary
stc Sub-secondary stations and Distributions stations depending upon their POSHIn in the power system hierarchy
bull Generally the Substations are of outdoor type for 33 kV and above EHV Stations can be indoor depending upon the environmental conditions like pollution salinity etc and space constraints Indoor stations are Air - Insulated or SF6 gas - insulated depending upon the availability of space and financial constraints Gas Insulated D Substations (GIS) are extremely costly and requires extra maintenance and hence are preferred only when it is absolutely necessary
3
gt
Substation types
r
~1
~~
I
~
~
()
fJ j
G
D
0
bull 0
bull 0
~
0
a J )
J
--middot
c~
~ bull
D
-
Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion
Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the
eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking
currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and
breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated
below are used in India
36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)
725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)
145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)
245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the
provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance
400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system
requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over
voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit
recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current
chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive
currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz
CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as
bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer
type breakers are designed restrike-free
CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design
and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers
on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme
where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when
compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs
combination These are not popular in Indio
Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides
of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less
PlCnensive than dead tank CBs
-
middot
~
)
0
)
0 ~)
0
middot0
bull 1)
11
bull V
~
0
0
~
0
J
D
J
f)
gt ~
Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches
Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions
isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open
and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when
middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the
Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short
circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load
from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a
variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum
influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok
type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space
than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal
double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance
The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy
loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the
disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although
such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is
more difficult and time consuming
The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker
orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker
e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance
Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit
which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not
required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the
primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They
isoloe the primary system from the secondary
Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The
bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types
are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit
breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So
for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current
transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These
transform offer the following advantages
bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and
ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable
bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance
bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high
currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to
which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these
have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and
transported carefully -
~ It -
I ) Different classes of accuracy i
The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection
~ bull Metering
These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current
f)
bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher
magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters
~ Protection Classesmiddot
(110
bull
bull PS
Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In
terms of the following charaderiscs it
1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled
0 transformation ratio
3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the
j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level
and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used
I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT
R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC
~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser
3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any
specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
introduces lhe di(fllrent types 01 submiddotslaions
Generation station
Generation is done at 11 kV - 15 kV level As power of very high capacities cannot be nsmitted for long distances at these voltages it is stepped up using generator transformers to 110 kV - 400 kV levels Generation stations are in simple terms ~ step-up stations
)
Grid station o () Grid Stations are used to interconnect different gridsregionssectors They are
generally 400 kV substations They are stotions switching power from one generationgrid station to other They can olso be called Switching Stations
Distribution station
Distribution Stations are located at the load points where the power is stepped down to bull ~
bull o 11 kV - 110 kV levels
Bulk Industrial supply stations o
bull Bulk Industrial Supply Stations are distribution stations catering to one or 0 few consumers The supply voltage can range from 33 kV to 110 kV Industriol users do
I have their own generotion focilities besides the SEB supply and these s1a1ions oct asie step-up stations as well
bull o Sur 1S can also be classified as Step-up stotions Primary grid Stations Secondary
stc Sub-secondary stations and Distributions stations depending upon their POSHIn in the power system hierarchy
bull Generally the Substations are of outdoor type for 33 kV and above EHV Stations can be indoor depending upon the environmental conditions like pollution salinity etc and space constraints Indoor stations are Air - Insulated or SF6 gas - insulated depending upon the availability of space and financial constraints Gas Insulated D Substations (GIS) are extremely costly and requires extra maintenance and hence are preferred only when it is absolutely necessary
3
gt
Substation types
r
~1
~~
I
~
~
()
fJ j
G
D
0
bull 0
bull 0
~
0
a J )
J
--middot
c~
~ bull
D
-
Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion
Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the
eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking
currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and
breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated
below are used in India
36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)
725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)
145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)
245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the
provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance
400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system
requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over
voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit
recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current
chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive
currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz
CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as
bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer
type breakers are designed restrike-free
CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design
and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers
on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme
where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when
compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs
combination These are not popular in Indio
Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides
of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less
PlCnensive than dead tank CBs
-
middot
~
)
0
)
0 ~)
0
middot0
bull 1)
11
bull V
~
0
0
~
0
J
D
J
f)
gt ~
Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches
Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions
isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open
and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when
middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the
Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short
circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load
from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a
variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum
influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok
type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space
than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal
double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance
The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy
loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the
disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although
such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is
more difficult and time consuming
The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker
orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker
e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance
Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit
which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not
required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the
primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They
isoloe the primary system from the secondary
Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The
bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types
are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit
breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So
for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current
transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These
transform offer the following advantages
bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and
ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable
bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance
bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high
currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to
which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these
have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and
transported carefully -
~ It -
I ) Different classes of accuracy i
The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection
~ bull Metering
These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current
f)
bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher
magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters
~ Protection Classesmiddot
(110
bull
bull PS
Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In
terms of the following charaderiscs it
1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled
0 transformation ratio
3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the
j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level
and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used
I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT
R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC
~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser
3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any
specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
r
~1
~~
I
~
~
()
fJ j
G
D
0
bull 0
bull 0
~
0
a J )
J
--middot
c~
~ bull
D
-
Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion
Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the
eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking
currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and
breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated
below are used in India
36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)
725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)
145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)
245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the
provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance
400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system
requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over
voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit
recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current
chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive
currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz
CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as
bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer
type breakers are designed restrike-free
CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design
and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers
on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme
where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when
compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs
combination These are not popular in Indio
Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides
of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less
PlCnensive than dead tank CBs
-
middot
~
)
0
)
0 ~)
0
middot0
bull 1)
11
bull V
~
0
0
~
0
J
D
J
f)
gt ~
Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches
Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions
isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open
and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when
middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the
Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short
circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load
from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a
variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum
influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok
type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space
than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal
double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance
The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy
loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the
disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although
such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is
more difficult and time consuming
The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker
orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker
e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance
Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit
which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not
required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the
primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They
isoloe the primary system from the secondary
Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The
bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types
are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit
breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So
for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current
transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These
transform offer the following advantages
bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and
ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable
bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance
bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high
currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to
which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these
have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and
transported carefully -
~ It -
I ) Different classes of accuracy i
The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection
~ bull Metering
These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current
f)
bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher
magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters
~ Protection Classesmiddot
(110
bull
bull PS
Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In
terms of the following charaderiscs it
1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled
0 transformation ratio
3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the
j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level
and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used
I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT
R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC
~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser
3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any
specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
-
middot
~
)
0
)
0 ~)
0
middot0
bull 1)
11
bull V
~
0
0
~
0
J
D
J
f)
gt ~
Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches
Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions
isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open
and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when
middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the
Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short
circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load
from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a
variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum
influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok
type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space
than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal
double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance
The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy
loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the
disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although
such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is
more difficult and time consuming
The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker
orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker
e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance
Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit
which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not
required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the
primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They
isoloe the primary system from the secondary
Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The
bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types
are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit
breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So
for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current
transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These
transform offer the following advantages
bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and
ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable
bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance
bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high
currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to
which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these
have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and
transported carefully -
~ It -
I ) Different classes of accuracy i
The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection
~ bull Metering
These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current
f)
bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher
magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters
~ Protection Classesmiddot
(110
bull
bull PS
Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In
terms of the following charaderiscs it
1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled
0 transformation ratio
3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the
j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level
and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used
I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT
R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC
~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser
3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any
specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current
transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These
transform offer the following advantages
bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and
ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable
bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance
bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high
currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to
which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these
have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and
transported carefully -
~ It -
I ) Different classes of accuracy i
The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection
~ bull Metering
These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current
f)
bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher
magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters
~ Protection Classesmiddot
(110
bull
bull PS
Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In
terms of the following charaderiscs it
1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled
0 transformation ratio
3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the
j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level
and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used
I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT
R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC
~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser
3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any
specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
- J
~
1
~-- V
J -I
1)
0
~
fJ It
J
bull
)
~ 9
)
~ V
~
I
In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond
accuracy limit factor
x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous
volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur
secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15
P -+ Protection
Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo
lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of
lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified
limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20
ond30
Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor
type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue
metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to
their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line
Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an
earth electrode
For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe
connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit
breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization
The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be
bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30
bull for protection 3P and 6P
T ormer
Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore
important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large
dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two
transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being
wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are
provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain
the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the
transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation
One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the
transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The
space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase
transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy
phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
-
~ )
)
v
~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be
o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of
Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching
Reactivi Compensation Equipment
Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system
studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt
reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation
t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also
can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral
grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt
reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these
equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers
should be followed
Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot
thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr
Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and
conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt
capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in
seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)
output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the
initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops
Dired Stroke Lightning Protection
Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of
overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for
systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide
coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones
covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered
adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used
The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method
and Razevig Method
Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against
travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The
equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry
of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the
trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the
transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a
middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding
) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also
(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge
arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements
-J
0 ) Insulators
(i)
bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond
safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_
Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected
security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0
bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or
on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of
higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the
bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is
-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter
cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution
0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE
ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0
~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution
J Level Distance (mmkV)
0
~gt
Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea
~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting
smoke and chemical effl uents and
) not too dose to sea
) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close
~ to sea and exposed winds from sea
to strong
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc
The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage
distance
The following types of insulators are normally used
a) Bus Support Insulators
(i) Solid core type
b) Strain Insulators
(i) Disc insulators c _
(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators
) (iii) Polymer insulators
Structures(3
~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a
) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of
structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0
structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few
0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures
0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation
0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In
0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential
Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)
0
0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is
connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed
~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -
voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -
is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -
transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require
separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height
however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry
The differ-ent types of coupling used are
bull Inter-circuit coupling
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used
lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit
coupling
bull pr~e to Phose coupling
Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of
) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases
bull Phose to Earth coupling
Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the
earth is used as the return path
o -~--__ ()
tl ~ )i
o cD
~
bull o
It)
bull o
- -
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4
shy
-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ
~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR
COUPLING DEVICE
CARRIER TERMINAL
I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I
READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj
I IPHrEI
-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE
l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---
bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY
N 1
~[lER
iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__
ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS
~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Substation switching schemes
ti )
~
a t)
0
0
0
~
G
~
a ~
)
-
shy
shy
dela11s the switching sCMmes
Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in
design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors
which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the
important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are
bull System reliability and ovailat y
bull Operational flexibility
bull Limitation of short circuit level
bull Simplicity of protection arrangements
bull Ease of extension
bull Availability of land
bull Cost
The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on
the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc
Types of schemes
The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are
bull Single bus
bull Sectional Single bus
bull Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main
bull Double Main and Transfer bus
bull One and Half breaker
bull Mesh scheme
Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used
bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus
bull Double Main with bypass isolator
bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus
bull Double bus and double breaker
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
i
bull
Criteria for seledion
lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a
sub-station
i __
bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for
1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service
bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit
bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits
bull Economy
J
bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore
jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing
practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other
0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable
albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred
middot3
0 Single bus bar scheme
This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its
own circuit breaker
The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD
bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is
that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on
gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder
the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ
increased J
_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme
If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an
economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the
section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE
arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi
generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~
Ii
reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
bull
)
)
)
j
_r
)
)
)
I j I 0 J
0
3
0
-3
I
bull Q)
bull ~
bull 0
1)
J
)
J
~J
-
- gt
)
)
receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies
as per the opemting requirements
The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements
Main and Transfer bus bar scheme
In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of
a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected
with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer
bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In
case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is
cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such
circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit
breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful
interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred
at a time
Double bus bar scheme
In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit
breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the
buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar
y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a
bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy
passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be
energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus
scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance
Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively
costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where
outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system
operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the
relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)
the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler
and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar
arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required
from reliability considerations
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
)
) Double Main and Transfer scheme
In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one
spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )
transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from
) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to
couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3
~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple
() ------~-------
One and a half breakers scheme0
a I
bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two
0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme
described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid
feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)
feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in
0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two
breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit
bull emiddot
Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it
is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often
0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be
bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it
bull Mesh scheme
~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This
) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or
) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station
ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes
) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited
gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS
preferred to mesh scheme )
)
gt
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS
Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on
the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of
the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0
generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power
network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only
interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond
instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available
generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission
line
a Feeder Oearance
Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty
feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two
breakers to isolate a fault
Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive
loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that
particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to
F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible
In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault
becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths
b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components
The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of
equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any
equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of
failure af these is discussed below
Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable
substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the
continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon
in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
~--
-
t2
- ~
Q I
0
0
0
0
bull 0
~ ~
J
~
l
--
bull
stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on
which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck
Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service
c Redundancy in Design
The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active
or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are
switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite
advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even
during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of
breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active
redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder
Operational Flexibility
Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different
switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one
arrangement to another
Simplicity of protedion Arrangements
More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions
more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when
automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one
breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to
be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip
circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in
Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus
bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may
complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus
differential protedion is simple
Maintenance - effects on System Security
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
)
From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J
out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit
breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular
concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit
breaker maintenance
Ease of Extensions
Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af
feeders
InterlocksJ
~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches
) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic
1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes
ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be
~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are
0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated
bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its
associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT
designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull
aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES
The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the
r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance
) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety
I
reasons during the maintenance of equipment -
The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system
400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
-
LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge
kV 1425 10501 950
6501 550
5501 450
325
SWitching surge withstond voltage
kVp 1050
1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge
kV 630 460 140
Phase to ground Clearance
- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned
overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted
bull gt
0
() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to
J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0
3 Phase to Phase Clearance
()
It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD
bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the
phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system
a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection
variation in equipment geometry
bull ~ I
Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and
9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator
3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a
inm
400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063
) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063
Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)
Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10
i
J
Equipment Spacing
)
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
I
J
~ shy
a 0
i ~
bull 3
a
bull eshy
bull 0
bull middot3
)
3 )
) bull
)
)
)
)
-
The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering
bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment
bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment
bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches
bull Land availability
bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering
protection reach of LA
Bus Bars
The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors
Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers
The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations
Structure
All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal
conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit
amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in
design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry
structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation
hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15
a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure
sholl be hot dipped golvonised
Equipment Supports
Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type
Road Layout
Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Bus Post Insulator
~
~)0
~
0
i)
bull D
bull ~
-
i ~
7
I )
V
J
J
~
-
~ ~
sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor
Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical
requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design
Electrical design
The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for
use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse
withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet
power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio
interference voltage
For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in
the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the
insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance
Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)
Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be
designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to
short-circuit seismic load ond wind load
Short Circuit Force
Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force
N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108
Fs = p
Where
Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current
p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters
l = Span between two supporting points in meters
N = Correction fodor for actual field condition
K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular
buses K= 1
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
M = Multiplying factor
Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as
(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8
RMS Symmetrical 800
IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs
-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-
~ three phose symmetrical fault
~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the
() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value
for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )
f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally
)
The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)
I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range
of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component
i
FE =S x W
raquo bull ~
F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very
t strong
1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg
D Wind Force
~)
Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the
C J mechanical design of support insulators
--
The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS
802) isI --
p = 06 X Vl
)
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
f~
~ Where
) v = Vt x k x k
basic wind speed msJ
k = 0 wind force in kg is
1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII
Where 10
L _ length of the insulator
J B = breadth of the insulator
0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force
D
J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for
support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I
projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly
disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8
The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either
due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and
earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of
earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8
under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice
bull ~
i 0
)
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
0
Bus Hars
-
~~) J )
~
)
lJ
) Busmiddot8ft ~tr
bull
)
)
Sclce n of blls bars
BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used
for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The
bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf
bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and
conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to
large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed
that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus
The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between
supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited
to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting
tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design
of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably
locating the spacers in the conductor bundles
The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum
Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid
bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly
U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not
encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans
expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to
thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus
bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will
alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during
operation
The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the
specific application for which these are chosen
Rigid Bus Bor
Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are
available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to
consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar
Electrical
The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are
Continuous current rating and
Shof me current rating
Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due
convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be
13 times that of 1 s rating
The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the
specified time is
I x t x (2SAf A =)
0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258
Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =
t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC
T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0
Mechanical 9
The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are
Bending Stress
Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration
Bending stress
Three loads which causes the bending stress are
Wind load
Short circuit Force
Dead load
Wind load
Wind load on bus bar per meter length
WI = pxD
Where
p = wind pressure in kgm1
D = diameter of the rigid bus bar
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
S~)rt circuit force
10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =
Nnere
Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf
= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current
P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-
L Span between two supporting points in m -r~
J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady
~ - force N=OS
K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)
buses K= 1
( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8
(
Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0
due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically
0
The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl
8 where
g M = Belding moment in kgm
= WL8
bull ~
= resultant force in kgm
L = length of the bus bar in m
Z = section modulus m3
- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2
and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )
Vertical deflection
The vertical deflection is~
00054 X LA X W) =
Ex MI Where
L = unsupportedlengthinm
W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm
E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m
)
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or
l200
Aeolian vibration
The natural frequency of vibration is
561 ~deflection
which should be more than 275 cycles per second
-
~ Flexible Bus Bar
shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed
)-j
1)
0
0
middotV 0
fl)
0
~ ~
D
D
~l
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
-
Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment
t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under
IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen
limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near
grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock
-
Grounding can be of one the following two types
Intentional( -0
This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface
0 Accidental
~
g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor
1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility
J CLumstances that lead to a shock
0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system
and its resistance to remote earth
2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential
gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface
3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is
bridging iwo points of high potential difference
4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance
current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances
5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current
through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current
intensity
The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other
kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable
conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding
calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -
recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above
Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing
j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is
advantageous for two reasons ~
I0I0- gt --
1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time
J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes
) or possible hours
2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief
0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of
primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9
a Effed of Reclosing
Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such
circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~
permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single
~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively
bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus
accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is
reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater
Potential Difference during Shock Situations
Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid
may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of
remote earth
Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0
distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect
)
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
TCAP
-~
I
shy
- I
f t3
a middot3
D
bull 0
bull ~
)
~ ~
rl
shy
0
)
Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and
lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time
navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure
IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence
oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot
neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed
ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both
lands
Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground
grid
Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS
transferred into or out of the substation
Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE
Std 80 - 1986
Sizing the Conductor
The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression
te a p 10
=
Where
A = T
To = T
=0 0
=a
p =
RMS current in kA
conductor cross section in mm2
maximum allowable temperature in degC
ambient allowable temperature in degC
reference temperature in degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC
thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T
resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in
~
1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf
duration of current flow in s
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
)
)
TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)
= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )
SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ
middot ~ Material Constants
If -J
0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP
Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(
Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422
J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422
~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846
1300)J
Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846
0 1300
Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598
AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598
0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670
bull 1300
Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300
~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032
bull
Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing
the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared
and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit
should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is
Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t
The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage
ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is
E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t
E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t
Where
C = 1 for no protedive surface layer
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
f
)
~
0
J
I 0
0
Q
0
bull 0 Z)
bull
1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )
Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as
= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids
2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible
p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the
maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety
However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser
limiting volues
Grounding System Elements
1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting
ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth
2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a
number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common
ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location
NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce
potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be
f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth
3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors
that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or
elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure
minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical
operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal
gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the
crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat
4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a
specific area
Basic Aspects of Grid Design
Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout
plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal
grounding grid design
L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as
much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current
concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the
projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the
grounomg grid
2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where
practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short
ground connections
3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors
buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At
cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together
Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point
bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment
In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~
(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and
bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors
would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a
neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers
5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)
(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy
e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid
Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The
cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault
current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain
measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure
Design In Difficult Conditions
In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0
Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by
spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0
fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes
) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include
gt ~
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a
combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful
consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other
CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and
remote grounding facilities
12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with
a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling
(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine
both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the
surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J
metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J
steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid
paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and
overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI
(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall
resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta
the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that
qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to
other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be
carefully evaluated
bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient
volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when
sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and
thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low
resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large
structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam
Connections to Grid
Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the
cannections between
[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and
where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc
(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals
) secondory lighting and power circuits
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
-
bull bull
9
Design Criteria
There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system
lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are
bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without
exceeding any operating and equipment limits
bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the
danger of critical eledric shock
Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are
1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)
The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements
2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock
Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of
successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for
D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n
the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s
t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a
substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity
4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in
limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)
resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p
Designing a Ground Grid
The following step should be followed to design a ground grid
(i) Coiled field data
) (ii) Choose the condudor
) (iii) Assume Spacing
(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~
(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req
(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil
(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage
Em = pKKHl and
E = pKKHl
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
bullbull
_
Mesh Voltage (E)
shymiddot J
s
~
~ I
bullbull
~
bullbull bull 0
J
0 I
~
fl
J
Jshy
~
j-shy)
)
~
~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is
deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J
-v In -+ -- + -Inshy
2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere
K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids
with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and
~nroughout the grid areabull
K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few
ground rods none located in the corners or on the
perimeter
K_ = )1 + hho
h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)
D = spacing between parallel conductors in m
h = depth of ground grid condutors in m
n = number of parallel condudors in one direction
d = diameter of the grid condudor in m
Corrective Factor
K 0656 + 0172 n
For mesh voltage calculation
n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion
For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl
For step voltage calculation
n = max(xy)
For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K
Step Voltage (EJ
The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is
1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
i
bull bull
t
jshy ~
)~ I
bull ~
4J
0
bull 0
bull ) f)
~
tgt
-
shy-
1t
2h D+h o
Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m
1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +
1 w] Where
w + + + 2 3 4 n-1
Or for n ~ 6
W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)
The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad
that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth
In equotion for Em ond E
L = L+L
= 1+ 115L
for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter
for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter
Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~
L gt 116 + 0174 C P
Refinement of Preliminary Design
If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential
differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be
studied and applied where appropriate
1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid
potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to
decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid
Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in
stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients
depending on the method used
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
v
~
0 C)
)
0
a n
bull ~
~
D - i
)
)
)
)
(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of
grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more
eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The
problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where
earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid
perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper
gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more
dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter
gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors
around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the
slalion is increased
(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For
example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the
tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the
effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed
(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to
lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and
all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical
Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger
may be increased rather than diminished
I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to
eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault
By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be
completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as
grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the
general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later
Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E
Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es
These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison
with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The
inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the
inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid
designs )
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
0
3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for
) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both
- diredions __ 0
n S 25 0
025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h
1) D gt 25m
Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0
found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid
o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given
above0 Grid tance)~
1
G
e 0
bull tl) Where
h = grid buried depth in m
A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m
bull 0
Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043
Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is
3 ln
bull s =
k 0 Where
0 S = Cross section areo in mm
= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s
J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is
) Q (8 + 20)
~ K =
~
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
~
~
B + 9-
) i~=re
gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ
E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC
(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm
J = initial temperature of conductor degC
11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants
() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm
) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6
() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6
)
0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3
241 X 106
- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull
D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials
For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o
0 bull
bull )
middot9
0
Q
Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~
1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80
3 s current rating 118 73 46
IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)
A note on Fences
Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts
ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition
the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where
surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite
varied but a few facts are dear
Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed
(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area
(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or
without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but
with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
- I
1)
lt
0
j
~ )
I
0
()
0
bull 0
bull 0
l
0
0
)
)
)
iD IV
I D
D
~
Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and
thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the
maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in
~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept
Vlithin acceptable limits
Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either
follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the
oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent
ntervals
Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be
iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0
ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground
condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch
)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this
difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
)
0 ~
J
D
j
r Q )
0
0
0
0
bullbull 0
bull (
)
()
0
()
J
()
-
-~
J
gt
Direct Stroke lightning Protection
Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the
Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning
receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor
can be lightning rods or ground wires
Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the
insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be
protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is
bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning
discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the
leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed
The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is
small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of
meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide
protection with a certain degree of probability
Razevig Method
Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast
Lightning Most
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
)
shyl
JJ
shy cmiddot
------1 0- )
0
Q
0
t)
0
9
I
_~ __L __ _ I
I I
I
0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom
4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0
l
middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h
-- r)
l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h
~-~
-
Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~
r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J
h - height of the obiect to be protected ~
J
_-_ gt
-
I
I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn
0 b sinqlc
E q
height 30m is shown in the figure
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
middot
As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient
- ~
p = 55 -JH
Two Ughtning Masts
The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than
Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts
The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing
-+shy I
I I
k
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I r
----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T
---shy
I I
I I
0 I I
I I
1--_shy-
r- _
through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is
a ho = hshy h lt 30m
7 J
a
~) = hshy h gt 30m
J
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
7p a = h h
Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active
height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for
single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts
whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected
~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the
) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)
is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V
for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0
i~
o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i
bull e ~ o
bull 0
amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m
~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
S)
s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m
)
0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires
0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of
[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~
)
r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
bull bull bull
h
12h 1 -- [ hJOSh
J
o 0
()---- shy
o
) -+bull __-
bull 8 ~
f I
middot--rmiddot----~9
Ii
l
bull 0
hx gt 23 h
~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h
Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~
S = hshy0
4
0
)
J
)
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
bull
+
1)
~)
j 10middot I I o I
Q
bull G
Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309
e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull
e t )
o 8
o o ~
Protection angleZ) Ground level
lightning Conductor
- -- Object to be
prolected
~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
bullbullbull
o o ()
AtSTO)M
~)
t)
a o Q
o t ) ) bull
G
bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~
~ )
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
AlSTOM
Pre-tendering Design Requirements
The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station
------ even for a budgetory quote
0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the
bull U
J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are
I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme
~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus
10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-
Transmission)
0
bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus
) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus
Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n
with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO
adopted)
bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials
0
a Major eguipments are categorised as follows
v
1 Power Transformers eshy~
2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J
3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers
~
~
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
tJ
8
0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers
6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~
-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments
9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)
-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0
gt Bus Post Insulators
bullbull CJ
bullbull
) Disc Insulators
U
3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))
4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks
5 CfVT CVT Junction Box
6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars
7 Busbar materials
8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot
bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles
10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~
i 11 AC Dish ~
12 6c Distribution Boord
bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials
j b) lightning Protection System
14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room
15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures
0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors
0 18 Diesel Generating Sets
I) 19 SCADA
20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers
~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation
)
i ) i
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
- -
Major technical parameters considered for equipment are
0) Rated voltage
b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise
c) Breakdown insulation level
d)
e)
Creepage distance
Rated current carrying capacity
Rated short circuit current capacity with duration
Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9
g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt
bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators
bull c
bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are
-~ -shy
o 1) Phose to phose clearance
bull 3t Sectional clearance
It 4) Ground clearance
5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level
lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation
l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity
2 Plot plan of the proposed area
3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard
4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station
5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard
6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard
7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
J
8 - Additional provision for spore bays
Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro
1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station
J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood
3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to
() -~- -= customershy
o J Requirement of mandatory spores
o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI
4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~
~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull
1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation
9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring
- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --
1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating
livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull
Shed profile creepage cantilever strength
Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength
e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay
2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy
3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley
S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging
6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA
o
d)Disc Insulators
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
f) Isolators
g) Cables
-
() - -
hBusbar
i)Earthing material
1
0
~)
j) Battery
k) PLCC
~
0
bull 0
i) lightning Protection
i)
bull
t )
il
k)
Illumination
Structures
~
v -J
~)
J
8 Requirement of mimic panel
9) Simplexduplex type of panel
Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators
PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary
Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material
MS GICopper bars
lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid
i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)
ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal
iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap
By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers
Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures
1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries
2 Short circuit forces
3) Wind pressure
4 Gantry arrangement
5) Conductor span
6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas
) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately
no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature
1 Post Insulators
)
2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories
J
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
3) Structures
4) Busbar materials
S) Clamps amp Connectors
6) Earthing material
7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators
~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets
~ 10) Lightning protection system-L
11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy
() J 0
0
~
0-_
bull )
-
6 ) ~
)3
il )
- 1
j
I
~ f
ltJ
shy-J
Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)
__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects
1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials
A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
---
() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M
~ cJ
-~ ---I
NDER INfORMATION REPORT
II COMMERCIAL INPUT
CUSTOMER
iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT
2 cUSTOMER REF
3 DUE DATE i
4 ICOMPETITORS
A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER
~-ISOURCE 6~
FUNDING I
U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II
I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I
CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I
l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I
j I) i
PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER
) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1
NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN
I
Imiddot
i
fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy
I l I
i
YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO
iYES I NO
DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE
IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U
_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i
r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE
SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl
rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY
ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC
YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO
~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI
l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I
I
2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -
I I
I I
i
I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I
I
4 l 8 TpoundRMS
OF PAYMENT -
~~
It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1
9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO
~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I
If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017
I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~
----------------~--~ ~ bull
ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~
~
APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES
f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21
KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR
I
YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO
I
-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS
f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I
~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4
AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot
VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__
~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot
1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o
D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1
ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC
i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull
~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY
q-ofJ
~i~ ~ ) I
1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll
~~~ ~l~ (~p bull
bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
2
( ~j r
- W t bull
1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~
bull TECHNICAL INPUT
REMARKSNO PARAMETERS
1 System Rated Voltage kVrms
SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull
Single main bus t
I
Single main bus with transfer I
I iDouble main bus I
I II
Double main bus with transfer I - ~
I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i
I IOther (please specify) I I
3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I
4
-~-
Number of Bays I
0 Une I I
b Transformer _ shy -
shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy
e Bus Readorl _ j _
f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i
g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I
I I I
r
Ishy shy i - shy
i
- __ _ I
i I- ___ - shy -r
------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I
bull - - t I
I
~ - - -
- -
~-
i
~ bullbullbullbull
~ ~
~
4_
OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
7
I
_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _
__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11
v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~
tlSTO)M TIR
h Spore future (unequipped)
5
bull
Meteorological Dato
10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)
6
b Wind Pressure kg m2
c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations
Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j
Sile data
a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _
b
(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I
I -shy
I
I
I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i
1 Location of site ~- shy
bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy
of transformer
Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required
Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be
enclosed
)QF0308 B 20000407
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~
II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i
i 1 f
Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )
SLD
loyout Pion
Sclion Control Room
Struclurol I
rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS
middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___
anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-
~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~
Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I
~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot
~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I
YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t
)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I
i )~l
bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w
I
19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _
Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _
Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy
not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -
bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -
-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I
i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II
2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I
OampMENTS BY RSM IT I
r~ l f~f- I
ilJi
t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I
k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I
t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __
nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I
shy
~ I CATEGORY I
I
gti i J I I ii
~tF~lEIVtD
~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I